Table of Contents
- Contents
- Safety information
- Learning about the printer
- Understanding the printer control panel
- Setting up and using the home screen applications
- Additional printer setup
- Installing internal options
- Installing hardware options
- Attaching cables
- Setting up the printer software
- Networking
- Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
- Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
- Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
- Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup
- Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
- Verifying printer setup
- Loading paper and specialty media
- Paper and specialty media guide
- Printing
- Copying
- Making copies
- Copying photos
- Copying on specialty media
- Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
- Customizing copy settings
- Copying to a different size
- Making copies using paper from a selected tray
- Copying different paper sizes
- Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
- Reducing or enlarging copies
- Adjusting copy quality
- Collating copies
- Placing separator sheets between copies
- Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
- Creating a custom copy job
- Placing information on copies
- Canceling a copy job
- Understanding the copy options
- E-mailing
- Faxing
- Setting up the printer to fax
- Sending a fax
- Creating shortcuts
- Customizing fax settings
- Canceling an outgoing fax
- Holding and forwarding faxes
- Understanding the fax options
- Scanning
- Understanding the printer menus
- Saving money and the environment
- Securing the printer
- Maintaining the printer
- Managing the printer
- Clearing jams
- Troubleshooting
- Understanding the printer messages
- Adjusting color
- Change [paper source] to [custom string]
- Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
- Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
- Close door
- Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
- [Color] cartridge low [88.xy]
- [Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
- [Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
- Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
- Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
- Defective flash detected [51]
- Disk full [62]
- Disk must be formatted for use in this device
- Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
- Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
- Fax memory full
- Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
- Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Incompatible tray [x] [59]
- Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
- Insert Tray [x]
- Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
- Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
- Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
- Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
- Load [paper source] with [custom string]
- Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
- Load [paper source] with [paper size]
- Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
- Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
- Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
- Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
- Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
- Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
- Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
- Maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
- Memory full [38]
- Memory full, cannot print faxes
- Network [x] software error [54]
- No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
- Non-Lexmark [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy]
- Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
- Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
- Reinstall missing or unresponsive [color] cartridge [31.xy]
- Reinstall missing or unresponsive black and color imaging kit and all cartridges [31.xy]
- Reload printed pages in Tray [x]
- Remove defective disk [61]
- Remove packaging material, [area name]
- Remove paper from standard output bin
- Replace all originals if restarting job.
- Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
- Replace maintenance kit [80.xy]
- Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
- Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]
- Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
- Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy]
- Replace unsupported black and color imaging kit [32.xy]
- Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]
- Restore held jobs?
- Scanner automatic feeder cover open
- Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
- Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
- Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
- Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
- SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Some held jobs were not restored
- Standard network software error [54]
- Standard USB port disabled [56]
- Supply needed to complete job
- Too many flash options installed [58]
- Too many trays attached [58]
- [Type] imaging kit low [84.xy]
- [Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy]
- [Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
- Unformatted flash detected [53]
- Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]
- Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Solving printer problems
- Solving print problems
- Printing problems
- Confidential and other held jobs do not print
- Error message about reading the flash drive appears
- Incorrect characters print
- Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
- Large jobs do not collate
- Multiple-language PDF files do not print
- Printing slows down
- Print jobs do not print
- Print job takes longer than expected
- Tray linking does not work
- Unexpected page breaks occur
- Print quality problems
- Characters have jagged or uneven edges
- Clipped pages or images
- Gray background on prints
- Horizontal voids appear on prints
- Incorrect margins on prints
- Paper curl
- Print irregularities
- Print is too dark
- Print is too light
- Printer is printing blank pages
- Printer is printing solid black pages
- Repeating defects appear on prints
- Shadow images appear on prints
- Skewed print
- Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
- Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
- Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
- Toner rubs off
- Toner specks appear on prints
- Transparency print quality is poor
- Uneven print density
- Vertical voids appear on prints
- Color quality problems
- Printing problems
- Solving copy problems
- Solving fax problems
- Solving scanner problems
- Solving home screen application problems
- Embedded Web Server does not open
- Contacting customer support
- Understanding the printer messages
- Notices
- Product information
- Edition notice
- GOVERNMENT END USERS
- Licensing notices
- Trademarks
- Noise emission levels
- Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
- India E-Waste notice
- Product disposal
- Static sensitivity notice
- ENERGY STAR
- Temperature information
- Laser notice
- Laser advisory label
- Power consumption
- Regulatory notices for electromagnetic compatibility
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
- 日本の VCCI 規定
- European Community (EC) directives conformity
- Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
- Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
- Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
- Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
- Japanese telecom notice
- STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUN ...
- Patent acknowledgment
- Index
Lexmark CX517de User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for CX517de by Lexmark which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Contents
Safety information.........................................................................................7
Conventions...........................................................................................................................................................7
Learning about the printer......................................................................... 10
Finding information about the printer...........................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................. 11
Printer configurations........................................................................................................................................12
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner....................................................................................13
Using the ADF and scanner glass..................................................................................................................14
Understanding the printer control panel................................................. 15
Using the printer control panel.......................................................................................................................15
Understanding the home screen................................................................................................................... 15
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights...................................................... 17
Using the touch-screen buttons.....................................................................................................................18
Setting up and using the home screen applications............................. 20
Finding the IP address of the computer......................................................................................................20
Finding the IP address of the printer........................................................................................................... 20
Accessing the Embedded Web Server....................................................................................................... 20
Customizing the home screen........................................................................................................................21
Understanding the dierent applications.................................................................................................... 21
Activating the home screen applications....................................................................................................22
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................ 22
Setting up Forms and Favorites .............................................................................................................................. 22
Setting up Card Copy................................................................................................................................................. 23
Using MyShortcut........................................................................................................................................................ 23
Setting up Multi Send................................................................................................................................................. 24
Setting up Scan to Network...................................................................................................................................... 24
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.............................................................................................................. 25
Exporting and importing a configuration.................................................................................................... 26
Additional printer setup............................................................................. 27
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................ 27
Installing hardware options.............................................................................................................................33
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................ 36
Contents 2
Setting up the printer software...................................................................................................................... 37
Networking..........................................................................................................................................................38
Verifying printer setup.......................................................................................................................................41
Loading paper and specialty media......................................................... 43
Setting the paper size and type.....................................................................................................................43
Configuring Universal paper settings.......................................................................................................... 43
Loading the 250‑ and 550‑sheet tray..........................................................................................................43
Loading the manual feeder.............................................................................................................................46
Loading the 650‑sheet duo tray....................................................................................................................47
Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................48
Linking and unlinking trays.............................................................................................................................50
Paper and specialty media guide............................................................. 53
Using specialty media......................................................................................................................................53
Paper guidelines................................................................................................................................................56
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................59
Printing.........................................................................................................63
Printing forms..................................................................................................................................................... 63
Printing a document..........................................................................................................................................63
Printing from a flash drive............................................................................................................................... 65
Printing from a mobile device........................................................................................................................ 66
Printing confidential and other held jobs....................................................................................................68
Printing information pages..............................................................................................................................69
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................................ 69
Copying.........................................................................................................71
Making copies..................................................................................................................................................... 71
Copying photos..................................................................................................................................................72
Copying on specialty media........................................................................................................................... 72
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel....................................................................... 73
Customizing copy settings.............................................................................................................................. 74
Placing information on copies........................................................................................................................79
Canceling a copy job........................................................................................................................................80
Understanding the copy options.................................................................................................................. 80
Contents 3
E-mailing...................................................................................................... 84
Setting up the printer to e-mail......................................................................................................................84
Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 85
E-mailing a document.......................................................................................................................................86
Customizing e-mail settings............................................................................................................................87
Canceling an e-mail.......................................................................................................................................... 88
Understanding the e-mail options................................................................................................................ 88
Faxing........................................................................................................... 91
Setting up the printer to fax.............................................................................................................................91
Sending a fax.................................................................................................................................................... 106
Creating shortcuts........................................................................................................................................... 108
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................109
Canceling an outgoing fax...............................................................................................................................111
Holding and forwarding faxes........................................................................................................................ 111
Understanding the fax options......................................................................................................................112
Scanning..................................................................................................... 115
Using Scan to Network....................................................................................................................................115
Scanning to an FTP address..........................................................................................................................115
Scanning to a computer or flash drive.........................................................................................................117
Understanding the scan options...................................................................................................................119
Understanding the printer menus.......................................................... 122
Menus list...........................................................................................................................................................122
Supplies menu..................................................................................................................................................123
Paper menu....................................................................................................................................................... 123
Reports menu....................................................................................................................................................133
Network/Ports................................................................................................................................................... 134
Security menu...................................................................................................................................................142
Settings menu...................................................................................................................................................149
Saving money and the environment...................................................... 199
Saving paper and toner..................................................................................................................................199
Saving energy...................................................................................................................................................199
Recycling...........................................................................................................................................................203
Contents 4
Securing the printer................................................................................. 204
Using the security lock feature................................................................................................................... 204
Statement of Volatility....................................................................................................................................204
Erasing volatile memory................................................................................................................................205
Erasing non‑volatile memory.......................................................................................................................205
Erasing printer hard disk memory..............................................................................................................206
Configuring printer hard disk encryption................................................................................................. 206
Finding printer security information...........................................................................................................207
Maintaining the printer............................................................................208
Cleaning the printer....................................................................................................................................... 208
Checking the status of parts and supplies................................................................................................210
Estimated number of remaining pages......................................................................................................210
Ordering supplies............................................................................................................................................. 211
Storing supplies................................................................................................................................................214
Replacing supplies.......................................................................................................................................... 215
Moving the printer.......................................................................................................................................... 234
Managing the printer............................................................................... 236
Finding advanced networking and administrator information............................................................236
Checking the virtual display.........................................................................................................................236
Setting up e‑mail alerts................................................................................................................................. 236
Viewing reports............................................................................................................................................... 237
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server................................................... 237
Copying printer settings to other printers................................................................................................238
Restoring factory default settings...............................................................................................................238
Clearing jams............................................................................................ 239
Avoiding jams.................................................................................................................................................. 239
Identifying jam locations............................................................................................................................... 240
Paper jam in the standard bin.......................................................................................................................241
Paper jam in the front door.......................................................................................................................... 242
Paper jam in trays............................................................................................................................................244
Paper jam in the manual feeder..................................................................................................................245
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................246
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder.........................................................................................247
Contents 5
Troubleshooting....................................................................................... 248
Understanding the printer messages........................................................................................................248
Solving printer problems.............................................................................................................................. 262
Solving print problems.................................................................................................................................. 268
Solving copy problems..................................................................................................................................297
Solving fax problems..................................................................................................................................... 300
Solving scanner problems............................................................................................................................306
Solving home screen application problems............................................................................................. 310
Embedded Web Server does not open..................................................................................................... 310
Contacting customer support.......................................................................................................................312
Notices........................................................................................................313
Product information.........................................................................................................................................313
Edition notice.................................................................................................................................................... 313
Power consumption.........................................................................................................................................317
Index...........................................................................................................327
Contents 6
Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Dierent types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types
of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance,
property damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
Safety information 7
•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then lift the printer o the
trays. Do not try to lift the printer and the trays at the same time.
•Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
•Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone
system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Safety information 8
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The
guides are available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available
at http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending
on your operating system.
Learning about the printer 10
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation
for your country or region can be found on the
support Web site or on the printed warranty that came
with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the
store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have
it ready when you contact customer support so that
they may serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to
install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature -40 to 43°C (-40 to 110°F)
•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 11
2
1
5
4
3
1Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 76.2 mm (3 in.)
4Rear 101.6 mm (4 in.)
5Top 291.7 mm (11.5 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 12
Basic models
1Printer control panel
2Automatic document feeder (ADF)
3Standard bin
4Top door latch
5Right side cover
6Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)
7Manual feeder
8Optional 650-sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
9Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
•Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
•Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer 13
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
•Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
•Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
•Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
•Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
•Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
•Scan or copy documents from 216 x 296.9 mm (8.5 x 11.69 inches) dimension.
•Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) thick.
Learning about the printer 14
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
1
6
24
5
3
7
8
Use the To
1Display •View printing, copying, e-mailing, faxing, and scanning options.
•View printer status and error messages.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
6Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
7Stop or cancel button Cancel all printer activity.
8Clear all / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e‑mailing.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the
home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu
screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
Understanding the printer control panel 15
6
1
12 11 10
7
8
2 3 4 5
9
13
14
Touch To
1Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary
language of the printer.
2Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP
server.
6Arrows Scroll up or down.
7Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
9Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and
file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not
from any other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory
card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies •Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
•Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to
clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search Held Jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
•User name for held or confidential print jobs
•Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•Profile names
•Bookmark container or print job names
•USB container or print job names for supported file types
Understanding the printer control panel 16
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows
the path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you
touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the
number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does
not become the default setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message aects a function, then this icon appears and the
red indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Printer IP address
Example:
123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of
the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods.
You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so
you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not
physically near the printer.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and
indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Sleep button light Printer status
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
763
4
1
52
Touch To
1Arrows View a list of options.
2Copy It Print a copy.
3Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4Home Go to the home screen.
5Increase Select a higher value.
6Decrease Select a lower value.
7Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept Save a setting.
Understanding the printer control panel 18
Touch To
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the printer control panel 19
Setting up and using the home screen
applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3Look for the IP address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings
even when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 20
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home
screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home
screen applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Understanding the dierent applications
Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up
Card Copy” on page 23.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on
page 91.
Forms and
Favorites
Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For
more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting
up Multi Send” on page 24.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using
MyShortcut” on page 23.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing”
on page 84.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 119.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see
“Scanning to an FTP address” on page 115.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see
“Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you
must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on
accessing the Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 20.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
•Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
•Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms
directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the
documentation that came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the
information on the card in a more convenient manner.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
•Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
•Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the
application is used.
•Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy
of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast
automatically.
•Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full
size).
•Color Output—Select the check box to print the scanned card in color, or clear it to scan in black and
white.
•Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
–When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and
400 dpi for black and white.
–When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color,
and 300 dpi for black and white.
•Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax,
or e-mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the
destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified
destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see
“Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
•The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where
the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer
at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating
system.
•The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do either of the following:
•Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
•Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP
address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on
the printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near
the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create
bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other
printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
aClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
bFrom the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
cClick Configure, and then do either of the following:
•To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to save the configuration file.
Notes:
–When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration
file is saved.
•To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file
that was exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click
Apply.
3To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bDo either of the following:
•To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the
instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•To import a configuration file, do the following:
1Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved
configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
Available internal options
•Memory card
–DDR3 DIMM
•Flash memory
–Fonts
–Firmware
•Forms and Barcode
•Prescribe
•IPDS
•Printer hard disk
Note: To install a printer hard disk, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your
service representative.
Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 27
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
1At the back of the printer, turn the screws counterclockwise to remove them.
2Slightly open the controller board access cover, and then shift to the right to remove it.
2
1
3Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 28
321
1Flash memory or font card connector
2Printer hard disk connector
3Memory card connector
4Reattach the cover.
1
2
Additional printer setup 29
5Turn the screws clockwise to lock the cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 30
3Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
21
4Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall
until it clicks into place.
1
2
5Close the controller board access cover.
Additional printer setup 31
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then
turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 27.
2Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
2
1
Additional printer setup 32
4Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller
board.
5Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually
add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 38.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Additional printer setup 33
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any optional tray in the following order:
•Optional 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3)
•Optional 650‑sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
•Printer
Installing optional trays
The printer supports two optional input sources: a 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3) and a 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2)
with an integrated multipurpose feeder.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Unpack the optional tray and the dust cover, and then remove all packing material.
2Place the tray near the printer.
3Align the 650‑sheet duo tray with the 550‑sheet tray, and then lower it into place.
Notes:
•If you are installing both the optional trays, then the 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3) must always be below the
650‑sheet tray (Tray 2).
•The standard 250‑sheet tray can be labeled as Tray 1 by using the tray number label that came with
the optional tray.
Additional printer setup 34
4Align the printer with the 650‑sheet duo tray, and then lower the printer into place.
Additional printer setup 35
5Install the dust covers.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 38.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any
wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.
Additional printer setup 36
7
81
2
4
3
6
5
Use the To
1USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter or optional printer hard disk.
2Security slot Attach a lock to secure the printer in place.
3Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL
filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
5EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and
if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
6USB port Attach a keyboard or any compatible options.
7USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer using a USB cable.
8Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the software CD that came with your printer.
•Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then select your printer and operating system.
Additional printer setup 37
2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
2Select the printer you want to update, and then do the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
3Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3Apply the changes.
Networking
Notes:
•Purchase a MarkNetTM N8352 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless
network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came
with the adapter.
•A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP),
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you
begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing
the printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can
choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
Additional printer setup 38
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer
can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems
caused by a damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if
you are not sure which channel to select.
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the
key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must
be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate
on the network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless
utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID
or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access
point, or contact your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation
that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or
consult your system support person.
Additional printer setup 39
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn o the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
•The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push Button Method
2Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup >
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method
2Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
Additional printer setup 40
3Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access
point.
5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web
Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network
mode, and channel.
4Click Submit.
5Turn o the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
6To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set
up correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed
options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed
correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
•Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then
print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information
that aids network printing configuration.
Additional printer setup 41
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 42
Loading paper and specialty media
Proper selection and loading of media can improve how reliably documents print. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 239 and “Storing paper” on page 59.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the
printer menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and is loaded only in the
multipurpose feeder and manual feeder.
•The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches) and is loaded only in the
multipurpose feeder and manual feeder.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Tou ch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the 250‑ and 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an integrated manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650-sheet
duo tray, and the 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same way.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job is printing or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may
cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 43
2If the paper is longer than letter‑size paper, then squeeze and then slide the length guide at the back of the
tray to extend it.
2
1
3Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
2
1
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 44
4Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
2
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
5Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
6Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
7Place the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper.
Loading paper and specialty media 45
8Insert the tray.
9From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Mixing paper sizes or paper types in a tray may cause jams.
Loading the manual feeder
The standard 250‑sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on dierent types of
paper one sheet at a time.
1Load a sheet of paper into the manual feeder:
•Printable side facedown for one-sided printing
•Printable side faceup for two‑sided (duplex) printing
Note: There are dierent ways for loading letterhead depending on the mode of printing.
One‑sided printing using a letterhead Two‑sided printing using a letterhead
ABC
ABC
•Load envelope with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.
2Feed paper into the manual feeder only to the point where its leading edge can contact the paper guides.
Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high‑quality media designed for laser printers.
3Adjust the paper guides to the width of the paper loaded.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not force the paper into the feeder. Forcing the paper may cause jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 46
Loading the 650‑sheet duo tray
The 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2) consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder.
The tray is loaded in the same way as the 250‑sheet tray and the optional 550‑sheet tray, and supports the
same paper types and sizes. The only dierences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper
size indicators.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1
2
3
1Length guide tab
2Paper size indicator
3Width guide tab
Loading paper and specialty media 47
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.
2Open the multipurpose feeder.
3Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
Loading paper and specialty media 48
4Prepare the paper for loading.
•Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the
paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5Locate the maximum paper fill indicator and tab.
Note: Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the
paper guides.
1Width guide tab
2Maximum paper fill indicator
3Width guide
4Feeder extender
Loading paper and specialty media 49
5Paper size indicator
6Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.
•Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended printable side facedown and the top
edge entering the printer first.
•Load envelopes with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.
Notes:
•Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
•Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
•Paper should lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose
feeder and is not bent or wrinkled.
7From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty,
paper feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Loading paper and specialty media 50
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 43.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3Tou ch Submit.
4Tou ch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Loading paper and specialty media 51
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Tou ch Submit.
Configuring a custom name
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click
Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 52
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the control
panel.
•Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
•Print a test page on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
•Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source Printing Printable
side
Paper
orientation
Trays One‑sided Faceup Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Trays
ABC
Two‑sided Facedown Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering
the printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is
acceptable for laser printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 53
Source Printing Printable
side
Paper
orientation
Manual feeder
ABC
One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Manual feeder
ABC
Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering
the printer first.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering
the printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is
acceptable for laser printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 54
Tips on using transparencies
Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist.
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–Have an interlocking design.
–Have postage stamps attached.
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
–Have bent corners.
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex and fan the envelopes to loosen them. Straighten the edges
on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal
envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
labels loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
Paper and specialty media guide 55
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel o during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial
sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner
cartridge warranties.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content,
thickness, and texture, can significantly aect print quality.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
card stock loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly aect the print quality and cause jams or other paper
feed problems.
•Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges
on a level surface.
Paper guidelines
Select the correct paper or specialty media to reduce printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample
of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics aect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when
evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 176‑g/m2 (47‑lb) bond grain long paper. The
multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 176‑g/m2 (47‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper
lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be sti enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use
75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), we recommend
90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Duplex printing is supported from 60–105‑g/m2 (16–28‑lb) bond grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Paper and specialty media guide 56
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly aects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If
paper is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100
and 300 Sheeld points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheeld points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper aects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing.
Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very dierent from the printer
environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively aect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be aected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm
(±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
Paper and specialty media guide 57
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
•Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an oset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not aected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other oce papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government
a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper.
However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of
test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for dierent temperature and humidity conditions.
Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled oce papers, but generally the following
property guidelines apply to recycled paper.
•Low moisture content (4–5%)
•Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheeld units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheeld units) and
much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheeld units) have been engineered
to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your
paper supplier.
•Suitable sheet-to-sheet coecient of friction (0.4–0.6)
•Sucient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and
paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is
required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing,
consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these
guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively
under normal printing conditions).
Paper and specialty media guide 58
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
•Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and
weights of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Supported paper sizes
Note: Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an
integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same
paper sizes as the optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports dierent paper
sizes, types, and weights.
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑she
et tray
ADF Scanne
r glass
Duplex
mode
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpos
e feeder
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
1 1 1 1
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.3 in.)
1 2 1 2 X
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
XX1XX X
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from
148 x 215.9 mm (5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the
length is from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 59
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑she
et tray
ADF Scanne
r glass
Duplex
mode
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpos
e feeder
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
1 1 1 1
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Oficio (Mexico)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
XX1X X
Universal
76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X1,3 X1,3 X X
Universal
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in).
1,2 1,2 1,2 XX 4
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from
148 x 215.9 mm (5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the
length is from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 60
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑she
et tray
ADF Scanne
r glass
Duplex
mode
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpos
e feeder
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
XX1X XXX
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
XX1X XXX
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
XX1X XXX
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
XX1X XXX
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)
XX1X XXX
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XX1X XXX
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XX1X XXX
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from
148 x 215.9 mm (5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the
length is from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Supported paper types and weights
Notes:
•Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper
as the 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports dierent paper sizes, types, and
weights.
•Labels, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper and specialty media guide 61
Paper type 250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet
tray
ADF Scanner
glass
Two‑sided
printing
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpos
e feeder
Paper
•Plain
•Recycled
•Glossy
•Bond
•Letterhea
d
•Preprinted
•Colored
•Light
•Heavy
•Custom
Type [x]
Card stock X
Labels
•Paper
X
Envelope X X X X
Paper and specialty media guide 62
Printing
Printing forms
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select form > Print
2If necessary, configure the print settings.
3Send the print job.
Printing a document
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before sending the
print job.
1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2If necessary, adjust the settings.
3Send the print job.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit
Adjusting toner darkness
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing 63
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
Max Speed and Max Yield let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield is the
factory default setting.
•Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The
printer prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
•Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent
color mode switching can result to slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3Tou ch Submit.
Printing 64
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer
control panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the
printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print
documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector,
the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the
memory device. Loss of data can occur.
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
Printing 65
3Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held
Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.ti or .tif
•.webp
•.fls
Printing from a mobile device
Notes:
•Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For more information on
configuring the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the
device.
•Mobile printing is available only in some printer models.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Printing 66
Note: Before printing, make sure that the Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud PrintTM is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print
to any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Notes:
•This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
•This application is supported only in some printer models.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3Tap Print, and then select a printer.
4Print the document.
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print
LexmarkTM Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.
1Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2Select a printer.
3Print the document.
Printing 67
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you
to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically
deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Tou ch Submit.
Printing held jobs
1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2Select the printer, and then do either of the following:
•For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
•For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3Select the print job type.
4If necessary, assign a user name.
5Send the print job.
6From the printer home screen, touch Held Jobs.
7Send the print job.
Printing 68
Modifying confidential print settings
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that
user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Click Submit to save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Tou ch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Printing 69
Canceling a print job from the computer
1Depending on the operating system, do either of the following:
•Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
•From the System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2Select the print job to cancel.
Printing 70
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy
paper are the same.
3From the printer control panel, press .
Copying using the ADF
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying 71
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2Adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan
the next page.
3Tou ch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4Touch > Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the next page.
5Tou ch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
Copying 72
3Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > > select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >
4Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Copy.
2Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not
saved.
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Copying 73
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a dierent size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy > > Copy It
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5Tou ch Copy It.
Copying dierent paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with dierent paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and
the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled
to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 74
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the dierent paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper
sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
4Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the dierent paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes
to fit on the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 75
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents
while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you
have two-sided original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4Tou ch > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Copy.
4From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original
document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5Tou ch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
•Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Tex t/ Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Copying 76
5Tou ch .
6Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7Tou ch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print
the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 77
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑
2,2,2,” then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see
“Collating copies” on page 77.
4Select one of the following:
•Between Copies
•Between Jobs
•Between Pages
•O
5Tou ch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto
a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to O, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy
job. Each set may be scanned using dierent job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job
is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans
the next set with the same or dierent settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
•If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes
empty.
•If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
Copying 78
For example:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and
then touch Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select
the type of header or footer you want
4Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5Tou ch , and then press .
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom,
and Draft.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 79
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option lets you select the paper size of the original document.
•Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
•To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
Copy to
This option lets you select the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
•Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are dierent, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale
setting to accommodate the dierence.
Copying 80
•If the type or size of paper you want to use is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the manual feeder or multipurpose feeder.
•When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a
matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to
load a paper in a tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set
automatic scaling.
•When copying to a dierent paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and
“Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are
copying.
•To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Tex t/ Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Copying 81
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF
tray.
•Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-
sided, and how documents are bound.
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you copy the document.
•Create Booklet—This creates a booklet. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Header/Footer—This inserts Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and then prints them
in the specified header or footer location.
•Margin Shift—This increases or decreases the page margin by shifting the scanned image. Touch or
to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
•Overlay—This creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose
from Confidential, Copy, Draft, and Urgent, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text”
field. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Copying 82
•Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also
called N-up printing, where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of
your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
•Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator
sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is dierent from the paper your
copies are printed on.
Copying 83
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing 84
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple
addresses, then separate each address with a comma.
5Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2Tou ch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3Tou ch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not
saved.
5Tou ch .
6Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing 85
E-mailing a document
Note: You can also send an e-mail by using the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen.
For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 22.
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper
size are the same.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
•To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
you want to add.
•You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5Tou ch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
that you want to add.
4Tou ch Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
E-mailing 86
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number
that you want to add, or search the address book.
5Tou ch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4Tou ch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5Tou ch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
3Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
4Tou ch > Send It.
E-mailing 87
Canceling an e-mail
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-
mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces
the file size.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
E-mailing 88
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Tex t/ Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu of
the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an
equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
•XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
•RTF—Use this to create a file in editable format.
•TXT—Use this to create an ASCII text file with no formatting.
Note: To use the RTF or TXT option, purchase and install the AccuReadTM OCR solution.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper. This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
E-mailing 89
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF
tray.
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you e‑mail the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
E-mailing 90
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top
or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the
business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending
fax machine, business, other entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for
telecommunication terminal equipment” on page 320.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded
Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax
setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax
capabilities, then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
aEnter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
bEnter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Faxing 91
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Setting up fax using a standard telephone line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Faxing 92
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
•You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer O).
•If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a specified number of rings.
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for
the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes
automatically.
Faxing 93
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 94
Connected to dierent wall jacks
PHONE
LINE
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
•Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering
machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to six.
Faxing 95
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
•This setup works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax, and if you subscribe to a
distinctive ring service.
•When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the
telephone to receive the fax.
•You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically, but turn o the voice mail service when you
are expecting a fax.
Setting up fax using digital subscriber line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 96
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Digital subscriber line (DSL) splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone
and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel.
To minimize interference between the two channels, ask for a DSL filter from your DSL provider.
1Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
3Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone port on the DSL filter.
Note: To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the telephone port of
the printer, and then connect the telephone.
Faxing 97
Setting up fax using VoIP telephone service
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge extra
cost for the activation of the second telephone port.
3Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 98
Notes:
•To check if the telephone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the port, and
then listen for a dial tone.
•If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay extra cost, then use a phone
splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the
printer and telephone into the splitter.
•To check the splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter, and then listen for a dial tone.
Setting up fax using cable modem connection
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Faxing 99
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
3Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Note: To check if the telephone port on the cable modem is active, connect an analog telephone, and then
listen for a dial tone.
Faxing 100
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Setting up fax in countries or regions with dierent telephone wall jacks and plugs
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing 101
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility
is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or
region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug
from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Faxing 102
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ11 wall jack
LINE
EXT
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it
directly to the telephone adapter.
Faxing 103
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering
machines. The F port is for telephones. Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
PHONE
LINE
NFN
1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices
as shown.
Faxing 104
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a dierent ring pattern. This
may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double,
and triple ring patterns.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
bSelect the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Faxing 105
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom
Time Zone Setup section.
4Click Submit.
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Fax.
Faxing 106
4Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.
5Tou ch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
For Windows users
1From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.
2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.
Notes:
•The fax option is available only with the PostScript® driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more
information, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
•To use the fax option with the PostScript driver, configure and enable it in the Configuration tab.
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
2Select the printer.
3Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4Send the fax job.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4Tou ch Fax It.
Faxing 107
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on
enabling the address book feature, contact your system support person.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > > type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
4Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
5Tou ch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Faxing 108
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
3Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
•To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
•Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2Tou ch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
Faxing 109
4From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5Tou ch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Reports.
3Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
•In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers
you want to block.
Faxing 110
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or
while Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to
memory
1On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch
the job you want to cancel.
3Tou ch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen
appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released
manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•O
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
4If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
aClick Fax Holding Schedule.
bFrom the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
Faxing 111
cFrom the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
dFrom the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select from the following values:
•Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
•Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
•Super Fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Faxing 112
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page
(duplex). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Tex t/ Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Faxing 113
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Adjust ADF Skew—This option lets you straighten scanned images that are slightly skewed when received
from the ADF tray.
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror
Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before
you fax the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Faxing 114
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support
person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup
process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using
its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book
pages, small items (such as postcards or photos),
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address
may be sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination
becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination
could also be another PostScript printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a
document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There
are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control
panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning 115
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
4Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done
2Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
•If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
•If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Scanning 116
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4Tou ch > Send It.
Scanning an FTP using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next
recipient.
5Tou ch > Send It.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
ABC
Scanning 117
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, small items (such
as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media
(such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to
be directly connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer. You can scan the
document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then
downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
7Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
aLoad an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
bIf you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
cDo either of the following:
•Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
•From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning 118
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
•This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
•Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.
Scanning to a flash drive
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to
Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Scanning 119
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Tex t—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Tex t/ Pho to—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned o in the Settings menu, then
TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
•XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
•RTF—Use to create a file in editable format.
•TXT—Use to create ASCII text file with no formatting.
Scanning 120
Note: To use the RTF or TXT option, purchase and install the AccuRead OCR solution.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the
paper.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex)
and Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:
•Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF
tray.
•Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature
settings before you scan the document.
•Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
•Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is
within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scanning 121
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Menu Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Waste Toner Bottle
Imaging Kit
Maintenance Kit
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan
Sizes
Universal Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup
Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Event Log Summary
Active NIC
Standard Network1
Standard USB
SMTP Setup
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security
Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Settings Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu2
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
OCR Settings3
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E‑mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Color Quality
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
[index of each installed
DLE]
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
3 This menu appears only if you have purchased and installed the AccuRead OCR solution.
Understanding the printer menus 122
Supplies menu
Use To
Cyan Cartridge View the status of the toner cartridges, which can be any
of the following:
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
View the status of the waste toner bottle.
Imaging Kit
OK
Replace Black Imaging Kit
Replace Color Imaging Kit
View the status of the imaging kit.
Maintenance Kit
OK
Replace
View the status of the maintenance kit.
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•The 650‑sheet duo tray must be installed in order for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting in the Paper menu.
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Understanding the printer menus 123
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Universal
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked
tray.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Glossy
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x]
is the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom
Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
•Transparency is supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 124
Use To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
•The menu item applies only when the multipurpose feeder (MP
Feeder) is installed.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
The paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Note: Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 125
Use To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 126
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
O
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not
available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•O indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 127
Use To
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only if custom type is supported.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 128
Use To
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Understanding the printer menus 129
Use To
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough or cotton paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Notes:
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
•O is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Understanding the printer menus 130
Use To
Heavy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom
type is supported.
Notes:
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
•O is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type [x] name or a user‑defined custom name created in the Embedded
Web Server or MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting for Custom Type [x].
•The custom media type must be supported in the selected tray or
feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The Recycled paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom
Type [x] in the printer menus.
Understanding the printer menus 131
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
2 scans per side
O
On
Specify a custom scan size name, size, and page orientation.
Notes:
•8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.
•14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.
•Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•O is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•Inches is the US factory default setting.
•Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
•8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 0.01‑inch increments.
•216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
•14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
•356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either
direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than
the maximum width supported in the tray.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report on the current printer menu settings. The report also contains
information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options
that are successfully installed.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics, such as supply information and
number of printed pages.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network
option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
•This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
•This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set
in the printer.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or
printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Job Buer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure that the memory card or hard disk is installed and working
properly.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Use To
Print Demo
Demo Page
[list of available demo pages]
Print demo files that are available in the firmware, the flash option, and the
disk option.
Asset Report Print a report containing printer asset information, such as serial number
and model name.
Event Log Summary Print a summary of logged events.
Network/Ports
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Ecient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the
Ethernet network.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
Understanding the printer menus 134
Use To
NPA Mode
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a
wireless network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Understanding the printer menus 135
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP
address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
O
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP hostname.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto
IP settings to O. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to O on
systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Use To
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
O
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
O
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
O
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Ye s
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Ye s
No
Send files to the printer using the built‑in FTP server.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server) which lets you monitor
and manage the printer remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address [x] View or change the current DNS server address.
Enable HTTPS
Ye s
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
•Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
O
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
O
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic
IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
O
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a
wireless network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network
when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point
with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Use To
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Ye s
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the
network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS
SmartSwitch is set to O.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL
SmartSwitch is set to O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On buers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Use To
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by
the printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to
the SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server
determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail
and User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•“Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to
the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is
selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and
Password
Prompt user
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use To
Edit Backup Password Create a backup password.
Note: This menu item appears only when a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks Edit the internal accounts, NTLM, various setups, password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template.
Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer
control panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users
are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the
factory default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1
to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding
the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is
the factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a
lockout time.
•Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
home screen before automatically logging o the user. Settings range
from 1 to 900 seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains
idle before automatically logging o the user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
No Eect
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
•No Eect means the reset has no eect on the printer security
configuration.
•Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the
user has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the
user has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the
Miscellaneous Security menu.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
•“Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided,
then the session is terminated immediately.
•“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then
the session is terminated immediately.
•“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is
provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is
provided, then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
•“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 143
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
O
2–10
Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
•When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print
jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time
for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned o, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory
are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by
the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros,
and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 144
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit
the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files
without having to turn o the printer for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple
pass method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
•To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the
printer.
•To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a
computer.
Delete Log
Ye s
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Understanding the printer menus 145
Use To
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Server
[256 character string]
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP
Stunnel
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Log full behavior
Wrap over oldest entries
E‑mail log then delete all
entries
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
•Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log
and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
•Remote Syslog Server determines the value used to send logs to the
remote syslog server.
•Remote Syslog Port identifies the port over which the printer transmits
logged events to a remote server.
•Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the printer to
transmit logged events to a remote server. Normal UDP is the factory
default setting.
•Remote Syslog Facility determines the Facility value that the printer uses
when sending events to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default
setting.
•“Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely
fills its allotted memory. “Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default
setting.
Understanding the printer menus 146
Use To
Configure Log (continued)
Admin’s e-mail address
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports
O
On
Severity of events to log
0–7
Remote Syslog non-logged events
No
Yes
E-mail log cleared alert
No
Yes
E-mail log wrapped alert
No
Yes
E-mail % full alert
No
Yes
% full alert level
1–99
E-mail log exported alert
No
Yes
E-mail log settings changed alert
No
Yes
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
•“Admin’s e‑mail address” determines if administrators are
automatically notified of certain log events. This setting can have one
or more e‑mail addresses (separated by commas).
•“Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs
each exported security log. O is the factory default setting.
•“Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4
is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends
events to the remote server that have a severity level greater than
the value of the “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory
default setting.
•“E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to
the administrator every time a log is deleted through the printer
control panel or EWS. No is the factory default setting.
•“E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when log entries are wrapping. No is the
factory default setting.
•“E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator
an e‑mail when the log fills a certain amount of its allotted space. No
is the factory default setting.
•“% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or
exceeds the value of the full alert level. 90 is the factory default
setting.
•“E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when there is a log exported. No is the factory
default setting.
•“E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the
administrator an e‑mail when the value of the Enable Audit Log
setting is toggled. No is the factory default setting.
•“Log line endings” specifies how line endings will be handled in the
log file, depending on the operating system in which the file will be
parsed or viewed. “LF (\n)” is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 147
Use To
Automatically Observe DST
On
O
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end
times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight
Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Oset
Enable the user to set up the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
O
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable Authentication
On
O
Change the authentication setting to On or O.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text that appears on the display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install special hardware for some languages.
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
View supply estimates on the control panel, Embedded Web
Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.
Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.
Eco-Mode
O
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. This setting resets the
printer to its factory default settings.
•Setting Eco-Mode to Energy or Paper may aect printer
performance, but not print quality.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Enable an ADF beep sound when loading paper.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet Mode
O
On
Reduce printer noise.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Use To
Run Initial setup
Ye s
No
Run the setup wizard.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the
keyboard on the display.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
•US is the factory default setting.
•The country or region selected in the initial setup wizard
determines the initial paper size setting.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Specify the display information in the upper corners of the
home screen.
Select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Custom Text [x]
Customize the text to display in the upper corners of the home
screen.
Note: You can type up to 32 characters.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Cyan Toner
Magenta Toner
Ye l low Ton er
Fuser
Transfer Module
Specify the display information for supplies.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to
display.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for certain menus.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•No is the factory default setting for Display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to
display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by User
Forms and Favorites
Card Copy
Scan to Network
MyShortcut
Multi Send
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
Select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Note: MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting. DD-
MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Use To
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the time.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
O
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
O
Volume
1–10
Set the button volume and feedback.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
Ye s
No
Specify whether to display bookmarks from the Held Jobs
area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
O
Specify whether to allow image background removal.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
O
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF.
Notes:
•Job level is the factory default setting. If Job level is
selected, then rescan the entire job.
•If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed
page forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web
Server refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specify the printer location.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Use To
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
O
Single
Continuous
Note: Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control
and Cartridge Alarm.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Set the time before the printer enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep
Mode.
Notes:
•20 minutes is the factory default setting.
•Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to
O.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
Timeouts
Print with Display O
Allow printing with display o
Display on when printing
Print a job with the display turned o.
Note: Display on when printing is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active
Ethernet connection.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the idle time before the display automatically returns to
Ready state.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the
specified amount of time.
Notes:
•90 seconds is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in
the printer is printed.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the time the printer waits to receive more data from the
host.
Notes:
•40 seconds is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the time the printer waits for user intervention before it
holds jobs that require unavailable resources.
Notes:
•30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a hard disk is
installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots that the printer
can perform.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain
oine situations when these are not resolved within the
specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
O
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless other printer tasks need the memory
required to hold the pages.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use To
Print Recovery
Page Protect
O
On
Set the printer to print the correct output for a page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
O
Remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout
timer instead of returning to the home screen.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Speech Rate
Very Slow
Slow
Normal
Fast
Faster
Very Fast
Rapid
Very Rapid
Fastest
Adjust the Voice Guidance speaking rate.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Headphone Volume
1–10
Set the headphones volume.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Information Sent to Lexmark
Supplies and Page Usage (Anonymous)
On
O
Send anonymous device usage information to Lexmark.
Note: The default value depends on what you selected
during the initial setup.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer factory default settings.
Notes:
•Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
•Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads
stored in the flash memory or in a hard disk are not
aected.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Export Configuration File
Export
Export configuration files to a flash drive.
Export Compressed Logs File
Export
Export the printer compressed logs file to a flash drive.
Copy Settings menu
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
Auto
On
O
Specify whether copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9
Area Sensitivity
1–9
Set the amount of color the printer can detect from the original document.
Note: This menu item is applicable only when Color is set to Auto.
Allow color copies
On
O
Enable color in copies.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Setting this to O hides all color‑specific menus.
•This setting overrides the Color setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Note: 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting. This setting is selected
when using a one-sided original document for a one-sided copy job.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Paper Saver
O
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
O
Specify whether a border is printed.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the size of the original document.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the
ADF.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
O
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
1–9999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer
[Location]
O
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
Select from the following location options:
•Top left
•Top middle
•Top right
•Bottom left
•Bottom middle
•Bottom right
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for the location.
•All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
O
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Allow priority copies
On
O
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Use To
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
O
On
Automatically align the content at the center of the page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l low - B lue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for
each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratu re
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy
O
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use To
Restore Factory Defaults Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings.
Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines.
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Enable Manual Fax
On
O
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
•Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax
function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax
jobs.
Note: Equal is the factory default setting.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use To
Caller ID
O
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number masking
O
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask
setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
O by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
O
Include from Field
On
O
From
Include Message Field
On
O
Message
Include Logo
On
O
Include Footer [x]
On
O
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
•O by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
•O is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-
sided scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Use To
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified
number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Ye s
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Ye s
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
O
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Ye s
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
Scan Preview
On
O
Show whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l low - B lue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratu re
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans
O by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note: O by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
O
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
O
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
On
O
Display the caller ID information of an incoming fax.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer
Ye s
No
Set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Manually enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Notes:
•9 is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
On
O
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the
designated fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
On
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
O
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received
fax.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
•Fax is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP,
LDSS, or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
O
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax
ID specified.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
O
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released.
Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
O
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a receive error log.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print Logs
On
O
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or
fax name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
On
O
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always O
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until
the fax connection is made.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Set the speaker volume to high or low.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
O
On
Enable or disable the ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Use To
To Form at Enter specific fax information using the control panel.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specify SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server port information.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specify the image format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the content was originally produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single‑page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all
the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the
scan job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Analog Receive
O
On
Enable receiving of analog faxes.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
O by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size.
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
•The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server Web link settings.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Notes:
•PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
•To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu
item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
•O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
•To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the
image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Text Defau lt
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Phot o Defa ult
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images
when Color is set to O.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-
mail Destination screen.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l low - B lue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratu re
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Use To
Use cc:/bcc:
O
On
Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Notes:
•PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
•To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu
item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
•O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
•To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Color
O
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for
two‑sided scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Defau lt
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Phot o Defa ult
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Use To
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
O
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta‑Green
Ye l l o w ‑Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is supported only in some printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratu re
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer
output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the
default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Notes:
•PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
•To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
O
On
Searchable PDF
O
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
•O is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
•To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
O
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
O
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for
two‑sided scanning.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Defau lt
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Phot o Defa ult
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
O
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
O
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
O
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk
is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Ye l low - B lue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
O
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
O
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
O
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
O
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temp eratu re
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the
default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Color
Color
Black only
Specify whether to print the document in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming print jobs.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for two-sided pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple-page images on one side of the paper.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or in landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
OCR Settings menu
Note: This menu appears only if you have purchased and installed the AccuRead OCR solution.
Use To
Auto Rotate
On
O
Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Despeckle
O
On
Remove specks from a scanned image.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Inverse Detection
On
O
Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Contrast Enhance
O
On
Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 185
Use To
Recognized Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Portugues
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
Polish
Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize.
For each language, select from the following options:
O
On
Note: The language is enabled by default. If it is set to a value that is not in
the list of recognized languages, English is enabled by default.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
•Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software
program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job Waiting
On
O
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require
unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are stored in a separate
print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information or
options are obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not
deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in
the non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips
the image at the boundary.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non‑printable area
defined by the Normal setting. Whole Page only aects pages printed
using a PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no eect on pages printed
using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Max Speed
Set the printer for a faster print speed or for a higher toner yield.
Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Black Only Mode
On
O
Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the RAM is
temporary.
•Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them
in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the
printer hard disk even when the printer is turned o.
•This menu item appears only when a flash drive or a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
On
O
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and
macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more
memory than is available.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the
downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in
order to process print jobs.
•On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If
the printer runs out of memory, then Memory Full [38] appears, and
downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All
is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in
alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•“1 sided” is the factory default setting.
•You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or
Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after
all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job.
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so
that the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper
Saver.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they
are in portrait or in landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between
portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Mode
Color
Black Only
Specify whether to print images in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Color Correction
Auto
O
Manual
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Print Resolution
1200 dpi
4800 CQ
Specify the output resolution in dots per inch (dpi) or in color quality (CQ).
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–5
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
O
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps,
electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Color Saver
On
O
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On overrides the Toner Darkness setting.
RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the brightness of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
RGB Saturation
0–5
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Ye l l o w
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
O—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
O—CMYK
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used
in the printer.
Manual Color
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Select from the following options:
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
O
Notes:
•sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image.
•sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics.
Manual Color (continued)
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Select from the following options:
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
O
Note: US CMYK is the U.S. factory default setting. Euro CMYK is the
international factory default setting.
Color Adjust Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Spot Color Replacement Assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
RGB Replacement Match the colors of the output with that of the original document.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
O
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold
expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Log Near Full Level
O
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log
Action at Near Full.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Log Action at Near Full
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Use To
Log Action at Full
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the
maximum limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the
default log file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting aects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are
not aected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from
the printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Ye s
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn o the printer while the flash
memory is being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory
card in the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buered
jobs, and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the
display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu
for touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen
printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating
screen after the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn o or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
O
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
O
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Ye s
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
O
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
O
Enable users to disable the SysStart file.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, non‑defective flash
memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image Smoothing
On
O
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and
smoothen their color transitions.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Image Smoothing has no eect on images that are 300 dpi or higher
in resolution.
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
•The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for
Download.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Use To
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the
international factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display
but it cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the
page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default
setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•“198 mm” is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
O
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
O
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
dierent source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
•“O” is the factory default setting.
•“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option
appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Understanding the printer menus 196
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Tay
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do
not specify a font.
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Use To
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
O
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation
settings for some images.
Invert
On
O
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Color Quality Provides information about solving color quality issues
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 198
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their
impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce
materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This
chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can
significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such
as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For more information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using
Eco‑Mode” on page 199.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer,
see “Using recycled paper and other oce papers” on page 58.
Conserving supplies
•Print on both sides of the paper.
Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
•Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Saving money and the environment 199
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. O supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before
the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper •Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
•Turn o print log features.
3Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There will be a short
delay before the first page is printed.
O Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 200
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch
Submit.
Setting Hibernate Timeout
Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes
into a reduced power state.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the
printer to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.
4Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 201
Using the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout
2Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.
3Tou ch Submit.
Using Schedule Power Modes
Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready
state.
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4From the Time menu, select the time.
5From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6Click Add.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment 202
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more
information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through
your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These eciencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle
the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse
or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or
demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Select the product that you want to recycle.
Saving money and the environment 203
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop
computers in the location shown to secure the printer in place.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory
(RAM) to temporarily buer user data during simple print
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for printer-specific functionality.
This lets the printer retain buered user data from
complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
Securing the printer 204
•The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data are completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered data, simply turn o the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following
these steps:
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Tou ch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 205
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
•Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential
material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3Tou ch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by
a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely
erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard
disk is installed.
Securing the printer 206
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Tou ch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn o the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the
printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, go to the
Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web Server—Security: Administrator’s Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Securing the printer 207
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and
supplies, may cause damage to your printer.
Cleaning the printer
Cleaning the printer
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
Notes:
•Perform this task after every few months.
•Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.
1Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.
Notes:
•Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
•Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.
5Connect the power cord, and then turn on the printer.
Maintaining the printer 208
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2Open the scanner cover.
3Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.
1White underside of the ADF cover
2White underside of the scanner cover
3Scanner glass
4ADF glass
4Close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 209
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > View Supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy
may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings,
and other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption
is dierent from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing
or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial
estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization*
test methods and page content.
* Average continuous black or composite CMY declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Maintaining the printer 210
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to www.lexmark.com or contact the place where
you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use
of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies
or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
•The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard.
•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield and may
cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
CX510 Return program toner cartridges
Item United States
and Canada
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
Latin America
Distribution
(LAD)
Rest of Asia
Pacific (RoAP)
Australia and
New Zealand
(ANZ)
Return program toner cartridges
Black 80C10K0 80C20K0 80C80K0 80C80K0 80C80K0 80C80K0
Cyan 80C10C0 80C20C0 80C80C0 80C80C0 80C80C0 80C80C0
Magenta 80C10M0 80C20M0 80C80M0 80C80M0 80C80M0 80C80M0
Yellow 80C10Y0 80C20Y0 80C80Y0 80C80Y0 80C80Y0 80C80Y0
Standard yield return program toner cartridges
Black 80C1SK0 80C2SK0 80C8SK0 80C8SK0 80C8SK0 80C8SK0
Cyan 80C1SC0 80C2SC0 80C8SC0 80C8SC0 80C8SC0 80C8SC0
Magenta 80C1SM0 80C2SM0 80C8SM0 80C8SM0 80C8SM0 80C8SM0
Yellow 80C1SY0 80C2SY0 80C8SY0 80C8SY0 80C8SY0 80C8SY0
High yield return program toner cartridges
Black 80C1HK0 80C2HK0 80C8HK0 80C8HK0 80C8HK0 80C8HK0
For more information on countries located in a region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer 211
Item United States
and Canada
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
Latin America
Distribution
(LAD)
Rest of Asia
Pacific (RoAP)
Australia and
New Zealand
(ANZ)
Cyan 80C1HC0 80C2HC0 80C8HC0 80C8HC0 80C8HC0 80C8HC0
Magenta 80C1HM0 80C2HM0 80C8HM0 80C8HM0 80C8HM0 80C8HM0
Yellow 80C1HY0 80C2HY0 80C8HY0 80C8HY0 80C8HY0 80C8HY0
Extra high yield return program toner cartridges
Black 80C1XK0 80C2XK0 80C8XK0 80C8XK0 80C8XK0 80C8XK0
Cyan 80C1XC0 80C2XC0 80C8XC0 80C8XC0 80C8XC0 80C8XC0
Magenta 80C1XM0 80C2XM0 80C8XM0 80C8XM0 80C8XM0 80C8XM0
Yellow 80C1XY0 80C2XY0 80C8XY0 80C8XY0 80C8XY0 80C8XY0
For more information on countries located in a region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
CX510 Regular toner cartridges
Item Worldwide
Standard yield regular toner cartridges
Black 80C0S10
Cyan 80C0S20
Magenta 80C0S30
Yellow 80C0S40
High yield regular toner cartridges
Black 80C0H10
Cyan 80C0H20
Magenta 80C0H30
Yellow 80C0H40
Extra high yield regular toner cartridges
Black 80C0X10
Cyan 80C0X20
Magenta 80C0X30
Yellow 80C0X40
For more information on countries located in a region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer 212
CX517 Return program toner cartridges
Item United States
and Canada
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
Latin America
Distribution
(LAD)
Rest of Asia
Pacific (RoAP)
Australia and
New Zealand
(ANZ)
Return program toner cartridges
Black 71B10K0 71B20K0 71B30K0 71B40K0 71B50K0 71B60K0
Cyan 71B10C0 71B20C0 71B30C0 71B40C0 71B50C0 71B60C0
Magenta 71B10M0 71B20M0 71B30M0 71B40M0 71B50M0 71B60M0
Yellow 71B10Y0 71B20Y0 71B30Y0 71B40Y0 71B50Y0 71B60Y0
High yield return program toner cartridges
Black 71B1HK0 71B2HK0 71B3HK0 71B4HK0 71B5HK0 71B6HK0
Cyan 71B1HC0 71B2HC0 71B3HC0 71B4HC0 71B5HC0 71B6HC0
Magenta 71B1HM0 71B2HM0 71B3HM0 71B4HM0 71B5HM0 71B6HM0
Yellow 71B1HY0 71B2HY0 71B3HY0 71B4HY0 71B5HY0 71B6HY0
Extra high yield return program toner cartridges
Black 71B1XK0 71B2XK0 71B3XK0 71B4XK0 71B5XK0 71B6XK0
For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
CX517 Regular toner cartridges
Item Worldwide
Black 71B0X10
Cyan 71B0H20
Magenta 71B0H30
Yellow 71B0H40
For more information on countries located in a region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
Ordering imaging kits
Item All countries and regions
Black imaging kit 700Z1
Color imaging kit 700Z5
Ordering a maintenance kit
Notes:
•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
Maintaining the printer 213
•The fuser and transfer module are included in the maintenance kit and can also be individually ordered
and replaced, if necessary.
•To replace the maintenance kit, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service
representative.
Part name Type Supply number
Maintenance kit 115 V
220 V
100 V
40X7615
40X7616
40X7617
Ordering a waste toner bottle
Item All countries and regions
Waste toner bottle C540X75G
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing
until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Maintaining the printer 214
Replacing supplies
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1Top door
2Waste toner bottle
3Right side cover
4Front door
1Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Maintaining the printer 215
3Open the top door.
4Remove the right side cover.
1
2
5Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 216
9Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
10 Close the front door.
Replacing a black and color imaging kit
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Maintaining the printer 218
2Open the top door.
3Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling them away from the imaging kit.
Maintaining the printer 219
4Remove the right side cover.
5Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
6Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.
Maintaining the printer 220
7Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.
8Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.
Notes:
•The color imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black developer
units.
•The black imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the black developer unit.
9Seal the used imaging kit in the bag that the replacement imaging kit came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 203.
Note: When replacing the black imaging kit, save the cyan, magenta, and yellow developer units. Dispose
only the black developer unit.
Maintaining the printer 221
10 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side‑to‑side.
11 Remove the red packing strip and the attached fabric from the developer units.
12 Gently insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.
Note: Make sure each developer unit is inserted into the matching color slot.
13 Remove the red packing strip from the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing
so may aect the quality of future print jobs.
Maintaining the printer 222
14 Align and then insert the imaging kit.
15 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.
Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.
Maintaining the printer 223
16 Insert the waste toner bottle.
17 Insert the right side cover.
18 Insert the toner cartridges.
Maintaining the printer 224
19 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
20 Close the front door.
Maintaining the printer 225
Replacing toner cartridges
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a non‑Lexmark toner cartridge is not covered under
warranty.
Note: A reduced print quality may result from using non‑Lexmark toner cartridges.
1Open the top door.
2Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pulling it away from the imaging kit.
Maintaining the printer 226
3Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then remove its packaging.
4Align the new toner cartridge, and then press the cartridge down until it fits into place.
5Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
6Seal the used toner cartridge in the bag that the replacement toner cartridge came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 203.
Maintaining the printer 227
Replacing a developer unit
Replace the developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Open the top door.
Maintaining the printer 228
3Lift the toner cartridge handle, and then gently pull it from the imaging kit.
4Remove the right side cover.
5Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 229
6Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.
7Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. Doing so could damage the
imaging kit.
8Remove the used developer unit.
Maintaining the printer 230
9Gently shake the replacement developer unit side‑to‑side before removing it from its packaging.
10 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.
11 Insert the developer unit.
Maintaining the printer 231
12 Align and then insert the imaging kit.
13 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.
Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.
14 Replace the waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 232
15 Insert the right side cover.
16 Insert the toner cartridges.
17 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
Maintaining the printer 233
18 Close the front door.
19 Seal the used developer unit in the bag that the replacement developer unit came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 203.
Moving the printer
Moving the printer to another location
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then lift the printer o the
trays. Do not try to lift the printer and the trays at the same time.
•Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
•Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Maintaining the printer 234
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging.
Maintaining the printer 235
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator
information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to
be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Managing the printer 236
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status
of the printer, network, and supplies.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•You can select alerts for toner cartridges, imaging kit, maintenance kit, and waste toner bottle.
•All alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all alerts can be set for the
end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail alert is available for all supply conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer shows the warning message and generates an email about the status of
the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
Managing the printer 237
Notification Description
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced
to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click the Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit
language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.
Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 42.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 205.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a
printer hard disk are not aected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Managing the printer 238
Clearing jams
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or
envelopes.
•Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Clearing jams 239
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.
•Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Identifying jam locations
Notes:
•When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Jam location
1Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2Standard bin
3Fuser
4Front door
5Duplex area
6Trays
7Multipurpose feeder
Clearing jams 240
Jam location
8Manual feeder
Paper jam in the standard bin
1Open the top door.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 241
3Close the top door.
Paper jam in the front door
Paper jam in the fuser
1Open the front and top doors.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 242
•Below the fuser
•In the fuser access door
3Close the top and front doors.
Clearing jams 243
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1Open the front door.
2Remove the jammed paper.
3Close the front door.
Paper jam in trays
1Pull out the tray.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 244
3Insert the tray.
Paper jam in the manual feeder
1Remove the tray.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 245
3Insert the tray.
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
1Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
4Reload paper.
Clearing jams 246
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder
1Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2Open the ADF cover.
3Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the ADF cover.
5Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
6Reload the documents into the ADF.
Clearing jams 247
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then touch Finished changing paper on the
printer control panel.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control
panel.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, and then touch Finished changing paper
on the printer control panel.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control
panel.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, and then touch Finished changing paper
on the printer control panel.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control
panel.
•Cancel the print job.
Close door
Make sure the right side cover is installed, and then close the front and top doors to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 248
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last
successful scan job.
•Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further
for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.
•Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.
[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
[Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job has been removed.
•The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a dierent
printer model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 249
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the defective flash memory card.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Note: To install a printer hard disk, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your
service representative.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
1From the control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2Do the following:
•Reduce the fax resolution.
•Reduce the number of pages.
3Send the fax job.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Troubleshooting 250
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Remove, and then reinstall the indicated tray to clear the message.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the
Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
•Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make
sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
•Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a dierent tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the indicated tray into the printer.
Insucient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 251
Insucient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin
collating the rest of the print job.
•Cancel the current print job.
Insucient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and
continue printing.
Insucient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the
printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds
from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of
paper, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the
printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds
from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot detect a tray or feeder that has the correct size and
type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 252
Load [paper source] with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that
tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints
from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the
printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds
from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of
paper, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded
to clear the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded
to clear the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 253
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded
to clear the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded
to clear the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer
support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, go to the Lexmark support
Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•Install additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 254
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the control panel, do either of the following:
•Tou ch Continue holding faxes without printing to clear the message.
•Tou ch Attempt to print to restart the printer and continue printing.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Non-Lexmark [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging kit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-
party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging
components. For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 211.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable
results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage.
Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your
printer, press and hold and the # button on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and
install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
•Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Troubleshooting 255
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, then install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the toner cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
•If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive toner cartridge.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the toner cartridge. The
cartridge may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see “Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 211.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive black and color imaging kit and all
cartridges [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the imaging kit is missing. If missing, then install the imaging kit.
For information on installing the imaging kit, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
•If the imaging kit is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive imaging kit.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the imaging kit. The imaging
kit may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see “Using genuine
Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 211.
Reload printed pages in Tray [x]
Try any of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing the second
side of the sheet.
•Cancel the print job.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Note: To replace the printer hard disk, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your
service representative.
Troubleshooting 256
Remove packaging material, [area name]
1Remove any remaining packing material from the indicated location.
2From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
•Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Tou ch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
•Tou ch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
•Tou ch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
•Tou ch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Replace maintenance kit [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or
contact your service representative, and then report the message.
Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Install the indicated imaging kit to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting 257
Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply.
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Replace the indicated imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark toner cartridge is installed:
32.13
32.16
32.19
32.22
32.25
32.28
32.31
32.34
32.37
For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 211.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported black and color imaging kit [32.xy]
Remove the indicated imaging kit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue
printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark imaging kit is installed:
32.00
32.01
32.02
32.07
32.08
32.09
32.36
32.37
Troubleshooting 258
32.51
32.52
32.55
32.56
32.57
32.58
32.59
For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 211.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
•From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:
•Tou ch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system
support person.
•Tou ch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Troubleshooting 259
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the
message.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what
supplies are needed to continue processing the current job.
1Order the missing supply immediately.
2Install the supply. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
•Cancel the print job, then install the missing supply, and then resend the print job.
Troubleshooting 260
Too many flash options installed [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
You may need to replace the imaging kit. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.
[Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
You may need to replace the imaging kit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be
replaced.
Troubleshooting 261
Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]
You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the Weblink server, or the server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear
the message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
Basic printer problems
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Turn o the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep
button to wake the
printer from Sleep
mode or Hibernate
mode.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and
the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Troubleshooting 262
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match
the following:
•The USB symbol
on the cable with
the USB symbol
on the printer
•The appropriate
Ethernet cable
with the Ethernet
port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned o by a switch or
breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the
printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any
packing material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn o the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the
hardware options,
and then turn on the
printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer
driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Troubleshooting 263
Action Yes No
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller
board.
aTurn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the
power cord from the electrical outlet.
bMake sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
cConnect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly
grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the
controller board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal
option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Troubleshooting 264
Action Yes No
Step 4
aCheck if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the
printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see “Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 38.
bResend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Cannot detect memory card
Action Yes No
Make sure the memory card is installed.
aInstall the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a
memory card” on page 30.
Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the
printer controller board.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed
in the Installed Options list.
Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure
that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
bCheck if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 265
Action Yes No
Step 2
aTurn o the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information,
see the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 38.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
bFrom the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On
or Auto.
cTo uc h Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 266
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
bInsert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aReview the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 239.
bFollow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
aRemove any jammed paper.
bFrom the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the
message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 267
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory
to process additional held jobs.
Action Yes No
Step 1
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify
that your print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
Go to step 2. Select one of the
Print and Hold
options, and then
resend the print job.
For more
information, see
“Printing held jobs”
on page 68.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then send it again.
•For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first
one.
For Windows users
aOpen the Print Properties folder.
bFrom the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate
documents” check box.
cEnter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job dierently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held
jobs.
Does the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Add additional
printer memory.
Troubleshooting 268
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear
USB port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB
port.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking
green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer
is ready, then view
the held jobs list, and
then print the
documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aCheck for an error message on the display.
bClear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives,
see “Supported flash drives and file types” on page 66.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 269
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn o
the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex
Trace mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
bResend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper
size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, open Printing
Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the trays are not linked.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 270
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set
Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides
the setting in the Finishing menu.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number
and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the
number of pages in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed
all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with
Adobe Acrobat.
bGenerate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aOpen the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
bClick File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 271
Printing slows down
Notes:
•When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•The printer speed may be reduced if printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated
temperatures.
Action Yes No
Place letter‑ or A4‑size paper in the tray, and then resend the print
job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog
and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must
select the printer for each document that you want to print.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aCheck if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the printer display.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the
message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if
the cables are securely connected to the computer and the
printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 272
Action Yes No
Step 5
aTurn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
aRemove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 37.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
bSelect Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select O.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity
of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then
resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aRemove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 273
Action Yes No
Step 4
aDisable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect
> O
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aCheck if the cable connections to the printer and print server
are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•The trays can detect paper length.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the
Paper Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aOpen the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the
same size and type.
•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 274
Action Yes No
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be
linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be
linked.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
bIncrease the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
cResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Check the original
file for manual page
breaks.
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPrint a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are
supported by the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Menus > Reports > Print Fonts
2Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
bResend the print job.
Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?
Go to step 2. Select a font that is
supported by the
printer.
Troubleshooting 275
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the
printer.
Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•From the printer
control panel,
change the
paper size to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•From the printer
control panel,
change the
paper type to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 276
Action Yes No
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reduce the toner darkness.
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the
toner density.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 277
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Troubleshooting 278
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper size loaded.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
type and weight from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Troubleshooting 279
Action Yes No
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 280
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the size and type of the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 281
Print is too dark
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select
Color Adjust.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the
toner darkness.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 4. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper
type, texture, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 4
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded on
the tray.
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting 282
Action Yes No
Step 6
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too light
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select
Color Adjust.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase
the toner darkness.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 4. Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Troubleshooting 283
Action Yes No
Step 4
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in
the tray
Go to step 5.
Step 6
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 284
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if there is packing material left on the imaging kit.
1Remove the imaging kit.
2Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
kit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside
of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
3Reinstall the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Action Yes No
Step 1
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 285
Repeating defects appear on prints
)
)
)
Action Yes No
aCheck if the distance between the defects is equal to one of
the following:
•25.1 mm (0.98 in.)
•29.8 mm (1.17 in.)
•43.9 mm (1.72 in.)
•45.5 mm (1.79 in.)
•94.2 mm (3.70 in.)
bIf the distance between the defects equals 25.1 mm (0.98 in.),
29.8 mm (1.17 in.), or 94.2 mm (3.70 in.), then replace the
photoconductor unit.
cIf the distance between the defects equals 43.9 mm (1.72 in.) or
45.5 mm (1.79 in.), then replace the developer unit.
Do the repeating defects still appear?
1Check if the
distance
between the
defects is equal
to one of the
following:
•37.7 mm
(1.48 in.)
•78.5 mm
(3.09 in.)
•95 mm
(3.74 in.)
2Take note of the
distance, and
then contact
customer
support or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 286
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has the correct paper type
and weight.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type
and weight in the
tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper
loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 287
Action Yes No
Step 2
aCheck if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the
tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
type and weight
from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper type
and weight
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 288
Action Yes No
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 290
Action Yes No
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Toner rubs o
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type, texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub o?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 291
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
aCheck if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
bResend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Uneven print density
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 292
Action Yes No
Step 2
aFrom the Paper Menu on the printer control panel, check the
paper type and paper weight.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
aLoad paper source with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of
the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer
monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount
of red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range
of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing
presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of
describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a
particular color.
Troubleshooting 293
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify the document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally,
they let users modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the help information
of your operating system.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer.
The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate
amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the color you want. The object
information determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one
type of color conversion table to text while applying a dierent color conversion table to photographic images.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to
process objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will
be implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text,
graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK
combinations).
Notes:
•Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or
CMYK combinations. It is also not eective in situations in which the software program or the
computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
•When Auto Color Correction is selected, the color conversion tables will generate preferred colors
used for the majority of the documents.
To manually apply a dierent color conversion table, do the following:
1From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate
color conversion table for the aected object type.
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
•Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be
applied to all incoming color formats.
•sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor.
Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.
•Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates
the colors displayed on a computer monitor. This uses only black
toner to create all levels of neutral gray.
•sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the
sRGB Display color correction.
Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing business
graphics.
•O—No color correction is implemented.
Troubleshooting 294
Object type Color conversion tables
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
•US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Oset Publishing) color output.
•Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate Euroscale
color output.
•Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK
color correction setting.
•O—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
Nine types of Color Samples sets are available from the Quality menu on the printer control panel. These are
also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set
generates a multiple‑page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB
combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is
obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion
table.
By examining Color Samples sets, you can identify the box whose color is the closest to the color you want.
The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software
program. For more information, see the help information of your operating system.
Note: Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the
particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color
Correction setting being used , the type of object being printed, and how the color of the object is specified
in the software program. When Color Correction is set to O, the color is based on the print job information,
and no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or
CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer
operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color
management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected
Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the
highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting
is set to Transparency.
Is the paper type setting correct?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 295
Action Yes No
Step 3
Make sure you are using a recommended type of color
transparency, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The color of the print does not match the color of the original file
Note: The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a
standard computer monitor. However, because of technology dierences that exist between printers and
monitors, there are many colors that can also be aected by monitor variations and lighting conditions.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aSet Color Correction to O.
Note: When the printer color correction is disabled, the color
is based on the print job information, and no color conversion
is implemented.
bResend the print job.
Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the
computer screen?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, do the
following:
aSelect Color Correction, and then select Manual.
bSelect Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color
conversion table for the aected object type.
cResend the print job.
Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the
computer screen?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The print appears tinted
Action Yes No
Adjust the color balance.
aFrom the Color Balance menu on the printer control panel,
increase or decrease the values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black.
bResend the print job.
Does the print still appear tinted?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 296
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
it back on.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 2. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper
loaded in the tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the
Paper Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 3. Change the paper
size setting to match
the paper loaded in
the tray, or load the
tray with paper that
matches the paper
size setting.
Step 3
aSpecify the paper size. Depending on your operating system,
specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 297
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and
the printer.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution setting for
a higher‑quality
output.
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and
the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 209.
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
aFrom the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
bFrom the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
cIf the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 5. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 275.
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 6. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Troubleshooting 298
Action Yes No
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content
Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select
a lower setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
bResend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Go to step 8. The problem is
solved.
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
bAdjust the settings:
•Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
•Contrast—Increase the current setting.
cResend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Go to step 9. The problem is
solved.
Step 9
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
aFrom the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
bAdjust the settings of the following:
•Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
•Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
cResend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 299
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line
is subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
•If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you
may have to change the default setting. There are two
settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
•The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
•Contact your telephone company to determine which
pattern or switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on
the display.
Troubleshooting 300
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
•Telephone
•Handset
•Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 5. Securely connect
the cables.
Step 5
aCheck the telephone wall jack.
1Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2Listen for a dial tone.
3If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a dierent telephone
cable into the wall jack.
4If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone
cable into a dierent wall jack.
5If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall
jack.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the
correct digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be
connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can
be used.
•If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect
the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port)
on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to
request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router
that will support analog use. For more information, contact
your DSL provider.
•If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure
you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If
none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone
line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector?
Go to step 7. Connect the printer
to an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Troubleshooting 301
Action Yes No
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 8. •Try calling the fax
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
•If the telephone
line is being used
by another
device, then wait
until the other
device is finished
before sending a
fax.
•If you are using
the On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear
a dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters)
between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending
or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 9.
Step 9
aTemporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily
disabling call waiting.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 10.
Step 10
aTemporarily disable voice mail service. For more information,
contact your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 11.
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
aDial the fax number.
bScan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 302
Can send but not receive faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you
want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
dClick Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax
mode, and then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS
output type. To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 303
Action Yes No
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the
ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies,
photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the
ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
•Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone
number that you want to dial.
•Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
•Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
•The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action Yes No
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Ye s >
Submit
bTurn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer
display.
cSelect a language, and then touch .
dSelect a country or region, and then touch Next.
eSelect a time zone, and then touch Next.
fSelect Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 304
Received fax has poor print quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
aCheck if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
bIncrease the fax scan resolution, if possible.
cResend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
•2400
•4800
•9600
•14400
•33600
dClick Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the
cartridge, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 305
Solving scanner problems
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the
printer display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print
server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Contact customer
support.
Tighten the cable
connections.
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to
the computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Go to step 2. Connect the cables
properly.
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Change the file
name.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 306
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing
file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box
selected in the destination configuration settings?
Contact customer
support.
Select the Append
time stamp or
Overwrite existing
file check box in the
destination
configuration
settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Poor scanned image quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution settings
for a higher‑quality
output.
Troubleshooting 307
Action Yes No
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free
cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 209.
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 5. Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
•From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
•From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
•When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 6. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 275.
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and
Content Source settings are correct for the document being
scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Problem solved. Contact customer
support.
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Contact customer
support.
Load the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Troubleshooting 308
The scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and
the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 3. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment
and then go to step
6.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 309
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab >
Log.
cFrom the Filter menu, select an application status.
dFrom the Application menu, select an application, and then
click Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
aTurn on the printer.
bOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
cPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 310
Action Yes No
Step 2
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
aView the printer IP address:
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,
and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bOpen a Web browser, and then type the IP address.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to
type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP
address to access the Embedded Web Server.
cPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the network is working.
aPrint a network setup page.
bCheck the first section of the network setup page and confirm
that the status is Connected.
Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection
may be intermittent, or the network cable may be defective.
Contact your system support person for a solution, and then
print another network setup page.
cOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
dPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure.
aConnect the cables properly. For more information, see the
setup documentation that came with the printer.
bOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
cPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Contact your system
support person.
Troubleshooting 311
Contacting customer support
Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:
•Printer problem
•Error message
•Printer model type and serial number
Go to http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,
support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.
Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries
or regions, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 312
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark CX510de, CX510dthe, CX517de
Machine type:
7527
Model(s):
636, 637
Edition notice
June 2017
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2017 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 313
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation
software CD.
Trademarks
Lexmark, the Lexmark logo, MarkNet, AccuRead, and MarkVision are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Lexmark International, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies
in the United States and other countries.
Mopria®, the Mopria® logo, and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 314
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Tay Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 52
Scanning 49
Copying 50
Ready 16
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your
local sales oce phone number.
Notices 315
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in
concentrations exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in
Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols without first touching
a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped
by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Notices 316
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 12‑milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655–675 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be axed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner ernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und oener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην
ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 600
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
640
Notices 317
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 65
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 35
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 3.7
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.5
O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned
o.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response
time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified
between one hour and one month.
O mode
If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Notices 318
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Regulatory notices for electromagnetic compatibility
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to electromagnetic compatibility.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Notices 319
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
日本の VCCI 規定
製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。
この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この
装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。
取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。
VCCI-B
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage
limits, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and EN55032 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1 or
EN 62368-1.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notices 320
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and
modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is
also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of
this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm
equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time
it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the
Notices 321
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance
transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the
equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés
n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro
REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là
d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un
parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur
répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL
(Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout
endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item
of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions
for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another
item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible
with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
Notices 322
This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following
limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and
•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt
and the beginning of the next call attempt.
•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to dierent numbers are spaced such that there
is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified
by JATE, with Certification Number A11-0160001.
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which
receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog
telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être
utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark
Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen
werden. Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Notices 323
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee
che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti
su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
Notices 324
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Notices 325
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher
Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with
SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to
Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in
the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites
for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic
Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version
1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
Notices 326
Index
Numerics
250‑sheet tray
loading 43
550‑sheet tray
installing 34
loading 43
650‑sheet duo tray
installing 34
loading 43, 47
Symbols
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 249
[Color] cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 249
[Color] cartridge very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 249
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy] 261
[Type] imaging kit nearly low
[84.xy] 261
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 261
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 20
Active NIC menu 134
adapter plug 101
adding hardware options
print driver 38
adding internal options
print driver 38
ADF
copying using 71
Adjusting color 248
adjusting copy quality 76
adjusting printer display
brightness 202
adjusting Sleep mode 201
adjusting toner darkness 63
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 236
advanced options, touch‑screen
copy 82
e‑mail 90
fax 114
FTP 121
AirPrint
using 67
answering machine
setting up 92
AppleTalk menu 139
applications
home screen 22
understanding 21
attaching cables 36
available internal options 27
avoiding jams 59
avoiding paper jams 239
B
black‑and‑white printing 63
blocking junk faxes 110
buttons, printer control panel 15
buttons, touch screen
using 18
C
cables
Ethernet 36
USB 36
canceling a print job
from the computer 70
from the printer control
panel 69
canceling an e-mail 88
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 310
Card Copy
setting up 23
card stock
loading 48
tips 56
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] 248
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] 248
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 248
changing output file type
e‑mailing 87
checking an unresponsive
printer 262
checking status of parts and
supplies 210
checking the status of parts and
supplies 210
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 236
cleaning
exterior of the printer 208
interior of the printer 208
scanner glass 209
cleaning the printer 208
Close door 248
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 249
collate
copy options 81
collating copies 77
color quality troubleshooting
color of print and color on
computer screen do not
match 296
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when
projected 295
color quality, troubleshooting
print appears tinted 296
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 249
confidential data
information on securing 207
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 69
confidential print jobs 68
Confidential Print menu 144
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 249
configuration information
wireless network 39
configurations
printer 12
configuring
multiple printers 238
supply notifications, imaging
kit 237
supply notifications,
maintenance kit 237
Index 327
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 237
supply notifications, waste toner
bottle 237
configuring e‑mail settings 84
configuring supply notifications
from the Embedded Web
Server 237
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 105
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
method 40
using Push Button Configuration
method 40
using the Embedded Web
Server 41
using wireless setup wizard 40
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 202
Eco‑Mode 199
Hibernate mode 201
Hibernate Timeout 201
Quiet Mode 200
Schedule Power Modes 202
Sleep Mode 201
conserving supplies 199
contacting customer support 312
content
e‑mail settings 88
content source
e‑mail settings 88
fax options 113
content type
e‑mail settings 88
fax options 113
control panel, printer
indicator light 17
Sleep button light 17
controller board
accessing 27
copies
copy options 81
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 80
using the scanner glass 80
copy options
collate 81
copies 81
darkness 81
Save As Shortcut 82
sides (duplex) 81
copy quality
adjusting 76
copy screen
advanced options 82
content source 81
content type 81
options 80, 81, 82
Copy Settings menu 157
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 297
partial document or photo
copies 297
poor copy quality 298
poor scanned image
quality 307
scanner unit does not
close 298, 307
copying
adding an overlay message 79
adjusting quality 76
canceling a copy job 80
collating copies 77
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 73
custom job 78
dierent paper sizes 74
enlarging 76
inserting a header or footer 79
multiple pages on one sheet 78
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 75
on letterhead 73
on transparencies 72
photos 72
placing separator sheets
between copies 77
quick copy 71
reducing 76
selecting a tray 74
to a dierent size 74
using the ADF 71
using the scanner glass 72
copying dierent paper sizes 74
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 78
copying on both sides of the
paper (duplexing) 75
copying on transparencies 72
creating a fax destination
shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 108
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 115
custom name
configuring 52
Custom Names menu 131
custom paper type
assigning 51
custom paper type name
creating 51
Custom Scan Sizes menu 132
Custom Type [x]
changing name 51
changing paper type 52
Custom Types menu 131
customer support
contacting 312
D
darkness
copy options 81
e‑mail options 89
fax options 112
scan options 120
date and time, fax
setting 106
daylight saving time, setting 106
Default Source menu 123
Defective flash detected [51] 250
delayed send
fax options 113
developer unit
replacing 218, 228
device and network settings
information
erasing 205
dierent paper sizes, copying 74
digital subscriber line (DSL)
fax setup 96
digital telephone service
fax setup 99
directory list
printing 69
Disk full [62] 250
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 250
disk wiping 206
Index 328
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 262
display, printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 202
disposing of printer hard
disk 204
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 105
documents, printing
from a computer 63
from a mobile device 67
DSL filter 96
duplexing 75
E
Eco‑Mode setting 199
Edit Security Setups menu 142
embedded solutions information
erasing 205
Embedded Web Server 237
accessing 20
adjusting brightness 202
administrator settings 236
checking the status of parts 210
checking the status of
supplies 210
copying settings to other
printers 238
creating a fax destination
shortcut 108
creating an FTP shortcut 115
creating e‑mail shortcuts 85
initial fax setup 91
modifying confidential print
settings 69
networking settings 236
problem accessing 310
scanning to a computer
using 118
setting up e‑mail alerts 236
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide
where to find 236
Embedded Web Server—
Security: Administrator’s Guide
where to find 207
emission notices 315, 319, 320
encrypting the printer hard
disk 206
enlarging a copy 76
envelopes
loading 46, 48
tips on using 55
environmental settings
Eco‑Mode 199
Hibernate mode 201
Hibernate Timeout 201
printer display brightness,
adjusting 202
Quiet Mode 200
Schedule Power Modes 202
Sleep Mode 201
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 144
erasing hard disk memory 206
erasing non‑volatile
memory 205
erasing volatile memory 205
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 250
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 250
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 38
Ethernet port 36
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 38
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
EXT port 36
exterior of the printer
cleaning 208
e‑mail
canceling 88
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 236
paper jam 236
setting up 236
e‑mail function
setting up 84
e‑mail options
darkness 89
message 88
original size 88
page setup 89
recipient(s) 88
resolution 88
Save As Shortcut 90
Send As 89
subject 88
e‑mail screen
advanced options 90
options 88, 90
E‑mail Settings menu 171
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 85
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 86
using the address book 86
e‑mailing
adding message line 87
adding subject line 87
configuring e‑mail settings 84
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 85
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 85
setting up e‑mail function 84
using a shortcut number 86
using the address book 86
using the printer control
panel 86
F
factory defaults
restoring 238
FAQ about color printing 293
fax
sending 108
sending at a scheduled
time 108
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 304
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 304
fax log
viewing 110
Fax memory full 250
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 161
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 169
fax name, setting 105
fax number, setting 105
fax options
content source 113
content type 113
darkness 112
delayed send 113
page setup 113
resolution 112
scan preview 113
Index 329
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 250
fax screen
advanced options 114
options 113
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 251
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 101
digital telephone service 99
DSL connection 96
standard telephone line
connection 92
VoIP 98
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 251
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 251
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 300
can receive but not send
faxes 303
can send but not receive
faxes 303
cannot send or receive a
fax 300
received fax has poor print
quality 305
faxing
blocking junk faxes 110
canceling a fax job 111
changing resolution 109
configuring the printer to
observe daylight saving
time 106
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 108
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 109
distinctive ring service 105
fax setup 91
forwarding faxes 112
holding faxes 111
making a fax lighter or
darker 110
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 108
sending using the printer
control panel 106
setting the date and time 106
setting the fax number 105
setting the outgoing fax
name 105
viewing a fax log 110
FCC notices 319, 321
file name
scan options 119
finding more information about
the printer 10
finding printer IP address 20
Finishing menu 187
firmware card 27
flash drive
printing from 65
Flash Drive menu 180
flash drives
supported file types 66
font sample list
printing 69
forms
printing 63
Forms and Favorites
setting up 22
forwarding faxes 112
FTP
FTP options 119
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 116
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 116
using the printer control
panel 116
FTP options
FTP 119
FTP screen
advanced options 121
options 120
FTP Settings menu 176
G
General Settings menu 149
Google Cloud Print
using 67
green settings
Eco‑Mode 199
Hibernate mode 201
Hibernate Timeout 201
Quiet Mode 200
Schedule Power Modes 202
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 38
held jobs 68
printing from a Macintosh
computer 68
printing from Windows 68
held print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 68
printing from Windows 68
Help menu 198
Hibernate mode
using 201
Hibernate Timeout
setting 201
hiding icons on the home
screen 21
holding faxes 111
home screen
customizing 21
hiding icons 21
showing icons 21
home screen applications
configuring 22
finding information 22
home screen buttons and icons
description 15
HTML menu 197
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 21
showing 21
Image menu 198
imaging kit
replacing 218
imaging kits
ordering 213
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 26
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 251
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 251
indicator light
printer control panel 15
individual settings information
erasing 205
Index 330
initial fax setup 91
using the Embedded Web
Server 91
Insert Tray [x] 251
inserting a header or footer 79
installing an optional card 32
installing options
order of installation 33
installing the printer software 37
Insucient memory to collate job
[37] 252
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 252
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 251
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 252
interior of the printer
cleaning 208
internal options 27
internal options, adding
print driver 38
IP address of computer
finding 20
IP address, printer
finding 20
IPv6 menu 137
J
jams
avoiding 239
locating jam areas 240
locations 240
jams, clearing
below the fuser 242
in the automatic document
feeder 247
in the duplex unit 242
in the front door 242
in the manual feeder 245
in the multipurpose feeder 246
in the standard bin 241
in trays 244
Job Accounting menu 191
K
keypad
printer control panel 15
L
labels, paper
tips 55
letterhead
copying on 73
loading, multipurpose
feeder 53
loading, trays 53
Lexmark Mobile Print
using 67
line filter 96
LINE port 36
linking trays 50, 51
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 252
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 252
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 253
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 253
Load Manual Feeder with
[custom string] 253
Load Manual Feeder with
[custom type name] 253
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 254
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 254
loading
250‑sheet tray 43
550‑sheet tray 43
650‑sheet duo tray 43, 47
card stock 48
envelopes 46, 48
manual feeder 46
multipurpose feeder 48
transparencies 48
loading letterhead
paper orientation 53
lock, security 204
M
maintenance kit
ordering 213
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 254
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 254
Maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 254
making copies using paper from
selected tray 74
manual feeder
loading 46
Max Speed and Max Yield
using 64
memory
types installed on printer 204
memory card 27
installing 30
troubleshooting 265
Memory full [38] 254
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 255
menu settings
loading on multiple
printers 238
menu settings page
printing 42
menus
Active NIC 134
AppleTalk 139
Confidential Print 144
Copy Settings 157
Custom Names 131
Custom Scan Sizes 132
Custom Types 131
Default Source 123
Edit Security Setups 142
Erase Temporary Data Files 144
E‑mail Settings 171
Fax Mode (Analog Fax
Setup) 161
Fax Mode (Fax Server
Setup) 169
Finishing 187
Flash Drive 180
FTP Settings 176
General Settings 149
Help 198
HTML 197
Image 198
IPv6 137
Job Accounting 191
list of 122
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 143
Network [x] 134
Network Card 136
Network Reports 135
OCR Settings 185
Paper Loading 130
Index 331
Paper Size/Type 124
Paper Texture 127
Paper Weight 128
PCL Emul 194
PDF 193
PostScript 193
Quality 189
Reports 133
Security Audit Log 145
Set Date/Time 147
Setup 186
SMTP Setup menu 141
Standard Network 134
Standard USB 139
Substitute Size 127
Supplies 123
TCP/IP 136
Universal Setup 132
Utilities 192
Wireless 138
XPS 193
message
e‑mail options 88
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 143
mobile device
printing from 66, 67
Mopria Print Service
using 66
moving the printer 11, 234
Multi Send
adding a profile 24
setting up 24
multipurpose feeder
loading 48
MyShortcut
about 23
N
Network [x] menu 134
Network [x] software error
[54] 255
Network Card menu 136
Network Reports menu 135
network settings
Embedded Web Server 236
network setup page
printing 42
Networking Guide
where to find 236
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 255
noise emission levels 315
Non-Lexmark [supply type], see
User's Guide [33.xy] 255
non‑volatile memory 204
erasing 205
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 255
notices 315, 316, 317, 318, 319,
320, 321, 322, 323
number of remaining pages
estimate 210
O
OCR Settings menu 185
optional card
installing 32
options
550‑sheet tray 34
650‑sheet duo tray 34
firmware cards 27
memory card 30
memory cards 27
options, copy screen
copy from 80
scale 81
options, touch‑screen
copy 80, 82
e‑mail 88, 90
fax 113
FTP 120
ordering
imaging kits 213
maintenance kit 213
toner cartridges 211
waste toner bottle 214
original size
e‑mail options 88
scan options 119
output file type
changing 87
scan image 120
P
page setup
e‑mail options 89
fax options 113
scan options 121
paper
characteristics 56
dierent sizes, copying 74
letterhead 58
preprinted forms 58
recycled 58
saving 78
selecting 57
storing 59
unacceptable 57
Universal size setting 43
using recycled 199
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 267
paper jams
avoiding 239
paper jams, clearing
below the fuser 242
in the automatic document
feeder 247
in the duplex unit 242
in the front door 242
in the manual feeder 245
in the multipurpose feeder 246
in the standard bin 241
in trays 244
Paper Loading menu 130
paper size
setting 43
Paper Size/Type menu 124
paper sizes
supported by the printer 59
Paper Texture menu 127
paper type
setting 43
paper types
supported by printer 61
Paper Weight menu 128
paper weights
supported by printer 61
parts
checking status 210
checking, on the printer control
panel 210
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 210
using genuine Lexmark 211
PCL Emul menu 194
PDF menu 193
Personal Identification Number
method
using 40
phone splitter 98
photos
copying 72
Index 332
placing separator sheets
between copies 77
PostScript menu 193
power cord socket 36
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 38
print driver
hardware options, adding 38
print irregularities 280
print job
canceling from the
computer 70
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 209
replacing a developer unit 228
replacing imaging kit 218
replacing the waste toner
bottle 215
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 284
characters have jagged
edges 275
clipped pages or images 276
gray background on prints 277
horizontal voids appear on
prints 278
print irregularities 280
print is too dark 282
print is too light 283
printer is printing solid black
pages 285
repeating print defects 286
shadow images appear on
prints 286
skewed print 287
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 288
streaked vertical lines appear
on prints 289
toner fog or background
shading appears on
prints 290
toner rubs o 291
toner specks appear on
prints 291
transparency print quality is
poor 292
uneven print density 292
vertical voids appear on
prints 292
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 269
held jobs do not print 268
incorrect characters print 270
incorrect margins on prints 278
jammed pages are not
reprinted 266
job prints from wrong tray 270
job prints on wrong paper 270
jobs do not print 272
Large jobs do not collate 271
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 271
paper curl 279
paper frequently jams 267
print job takes longer than
expected 273
printing slows down 272
tray linking does not work 274
unexpected page breaks
occur 275
printer
configurations 12
minimum clearances 11
models 12
moving 11, 234
selecting a location 11
shipping 235
printer control panel
adjusting brightness 202
factory defaults, restoring 238
indicator light 17
parts 15
Sleep button light 17
using 15
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 236
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 256
printer hard disk
disposing of 204
encrypting 206
wiping 206
printer hard disk encryption 206
printer hard disk memory
erasing 206
printer information
where to find 10
printer IP address
finding 20
printer is printing blank
pages 284
printer messages
[Color] cartridge low
[88.xy] 249
[Color] cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 249
[Color] cartridge very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 249
[Type] imaging kit low
[84.xy] 261
[Type] imaging kit nearly low
[84.xy] 261
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 261
Adjusting color 248
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] 248
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] 248
Change [paper source] to
[paper type] [paper size] 248
Close door 248
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 249
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 249
Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored
[57] 249
Defective flash detected
[51] 250
Disk full [62] 250
Disk must be formatted for use
in this device 250
Error reading USB drive.
Remove USB. 250
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 250
Fax memory full 250
Fax partition inoperative.
Contact system
administrator. 250
Fax server 'To Format' not set
up. Contact system
administrator. 251
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 251
Index 333
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 251
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 251
Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] [34] 251
Insert Tray [x] 251
Insucient memory to collate
job [37] 252
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature
[35] 252
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 251
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 252
Load [paper source] with
[custom string] 252
Load [paper source] with
[custom type name] 252
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 253
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 253
Load Manual Feeder with
[custom string] 253
Load Manual Feeder with
[custom type name] 253
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 254
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 254
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 254
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 254
Maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 254
Memory full [38] 254
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 255
Network [x] software error
[54] 255
No analog phone line
connected to modem, fax is
disabled. 255
Non-Lexmark [supply type], see
User's Guide [33.xy] 255
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources
[52] 255
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 256
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 256
Reload printed pages in Tray
[x] 256
Remove defective disk [61] 256
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 257
Remove paper from standard
output bin 257
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 258
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 257
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 257
Replace maintenance kit
[80.xy] 257
Replace missing [type] imaging
kit [31.xy] 257
Replace missing or
unresponsive black and color
imaging kit and all cartridges
[31.xy] 256
Replace missing waste toner
bottle [82.xy] 258
Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge [32.xy] 258
Replace unsupported black and
color imaging kit [32.xy] 258
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 259
Restore held jobs? 259
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 259
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 259
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if
problem persists.
[840.02] 259
Scanner jam, remove all
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 259
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 260
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system
administrator. 260, 262
Some held jobs were not
restored 260
Standard network software
error [54] 260
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 260
Supply needed to complete
job 260
Too many flash options installed
[58] 261
Too many trays attached
[58] 261
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 261
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 250
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 262
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 264
memory card 265
tray problems 265
printer problems, solving
basic 262
printer security
information on 207
printer software, installing 37
printing
black‑and‑white 63
canceling, from the printer
control panel 69
directory list 69
font sample list 69
from a computer 63
from a mobile device 66, 67
from flash drive 65
Max Speed and Max Yield 64
menu settings page 42
network setup page 42
printing a directory list 69
printing a font sample list 69
printing a menu settings page 42
printing a network setup
page 42
printing forms 63
printing from a flash drive 65
printing held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 68
Index 334
from Windows 68
printing in black and white 63
publications
where to find 10
Push Button Configuration
method
using 40
Q
Quality menu 189
Quiet Mode 200
R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 88
recycled paper
using 58, 199
recycling
Lexmark packaging 203
Lexmark products 203
toner cartridges 203
reducing a copy 76
reducing noise 200
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
[color] cartridge [31.xy] 256
Reload printed pages in Tray
[x] 256
remaining pages, number of
estimate 210
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 25
Remove defective disk [61] 256
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 257
Remove paper from standard
output bin 257
repeat print jobs 68
repeating print defects 286
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 258
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 257
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 257
Replace maintenance kit
[80.xy] 257
Replace missing [type] imaging
kit [31.xy] 257
Replace missing or unresponsive
black and color imaging kit and
all cartridges [31.xy] 256
Replace missing waste toner
bottle [82.xy] 258
Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge [32.xy] 258
Replace unsupported black and
color imaging kit [32.xy] 258
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 259
reports
viewing 237
Reports menu 133
reserve print jobs 68
printing from Windows 68
resolution
e‑mail options 88
scan options 120
resolution, fax
changing 109
Restore held jobs? 259
restoring factory default
settings 238
RJ11 adapter 101
S
safety information 7, 8, 9
Save As Shortcut
copy options 82
e‑mail options 90
scan options 121
saving paper 78
scan image
output file type 120
scan options
darkness 120
file name 119
original size 119
page setup 121
resolution 120
Save As Shortcut 121
Scan Preview 121
Send As 120
Scan Preview
scan options 121
scan preview
fax options 113
scan screen
content source 120
content type 120
Scan to Computer
setting up 119
Scan to Network
setting up 24
using 115
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a
computer 306
partial document or photo
scans 308
scan job was not
successful 306
scanner unit does not
close 298, 307
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 307
scanner
automatic document feeder
(ADF) 14
functions 13
scanner glass 14
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 259
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 259
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02] 259
scanner glass
cleaning 209
copying using 72
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 259
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 260
scanning
from a flash drive 119
quick copy 71
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 118
to an FTP address 116, 117
scanning to a computer 119
using the Embedded Web
Server 118
scanning to a flash drive 119
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 115
using a shortcut number 116
using the address book 117
Index 335
using the printer control
panel 116
scanning to network
destinations 115
Schedule Power Modes
using 202
security
modifying confidential print
settings 69
Security Audit Log menu 145
security lock 204
security settings information
erasing 205
security slot 36
security Web page
printer security information 207
selecting a location for the
printer 11
selecting paper 57
Send As
e‑mail options 89
scan options 120
sending a fax using the
computer 107
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 106
sending an e‑mail using the
printer control panel 86
sending fax
using shortcuts 107
using the address book 108
sending fax at a scheduled
time 108
sending fax using the address
book 108
Set Date/Time menu 147
setting
paper size 43
paper type 43
TCP/IP address 136
setting Hibernate Timeout 201
setting the fax number 105
setting the outgoing fax
name 105
setting the Universal paper
size 43
setting up e‑mail alerts 236
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 101
digital telephone service 99
DSL connection 96
standard telephone line
connection 92
VoIP connection 98
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 304
Setup menu 186
shipping the printer 235
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 73
e‑mail 85
fax destination 108, 109
FTP address 116
FTP destination 115
showing icons on the home
screen 21
sides (duplex)
copy options 81
Sleep Mode
adjusting 201
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 260, 262
SMTP Setup menu 141
Some held jobs were not
restored 260
Standard Network menu 134
Standard network software error
54] 260
standard tray
loading 43
Standard USB menu 139
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 260
statement of volatility 204
status of parts
checking 210
status of supplies
checking 210
storing
paper 59
supplies 214
storing print jobs 68
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 288
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 289
subject and message
information
adding to e‑mail 87
Substitute Size menu 127
supplies
checking status 210
checking, on the printer control
panel 210
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 210
conserving 199
storing 214
using genuine Lexmark 211
using recycled paper 199
Supplies menu 123
supplies, ordering
imaging kits 213
maintenance kit 213
toner cartridges 211
waste toner bottle 214
Supply needed to complete
job 260
supply notifications
configuring 237
supported flash drives 66
supported paper types 61
supported paper weights 61
T
TCP/IP menu 136
telecommunication
notices 321, 322, 323
the scanner does not
respond 309
tips
card stock 56
labels, paper 55
on using envelopes 55
on using letterhead 53
transparencies 55
tips on using envelopes 55
tips on using letterhead 53
toner cartridges
ordering 211
recycling 203
replacing 226
toner darkness
adjusting 63
Too many flash options installed
[58] 261
Too many trays attached [58] 261
touch screen
buttons 18
transparencies
copying on 72
loading 48
tips on using 55
Index 336
trays
linking 50, 51
unlinking 50, 51
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 310
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 310
checking an unresponsive
printer 262
FAQ about color printing 293
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 304
solving basic printer
problems 262
the scanner does not
respond 309
troubleshooting, color quality
color of print and color on
computer screen do not
match 296
print appears tinted 296
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when
projected 295
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 297
partial document or photo
copies 297
poor copy quality 298
poor scanned image
quality 307
scanner unit does not
close 298, 307
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 262
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 300
can receive but not send
faxes 303
can send but not receive
faxes 303
cannot send or receive a
fax 300
received fax has poor print
quality 305
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 267
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 269
held jobs do not print 268
incorrect characters print 270
incorrect margins on prints 278
jammed pages are not
reprinted 266
job prints from wrong tray 270
job prints on wrong paper 270
jobs do not print 272
Large jobs do not collate 271
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 271
paper curl 279
paper frequently jams 267
print job takes longer than
expected 273
printing slows down 272
tray linking does not work 274
unexpected page breaks
occur 275
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 284
characters have jagged
edges 275
clipped pages or images 276
gray background on prints 277
horizontal voids appear on
prints 278
print irregularities 280
print is too dark 282
print is too light 283
printer is printing solid black
pages 285
repeating print defects 286
shadow images appear on
prints 286
skewed print 287
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 288
streaked vertical lines appear
on prints 289
toner fog or background
shading appears on
prints 290
toner rubs o 291
toner specks appear on
prints 291
transparency print quality is
poor 292
uneven print density 292
vertical voids appear on
prints 292
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 264
memory card 265
tray problems 265
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a
computer 306
partial document or photo
scans 308
scan job was not
successful 306
scanner unit does not
close 298, 307
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 307
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 15
uneven print density 292
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 261
Universal paper size
setting 43
Universal Setup menu 132
unlinking trays 50, 51
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 250
USB port 36
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 116
using Hibernate mode 201
using Max Speed and Max
Yield 64
using recycled paper 199
using Schedule Power
Modes 202
using shortcuts
sending fax 107
using the address book 86
sending fax 108
using the printer control panel 15
using the touch‑screen
buttons 18
Utilities menu 192
V
verify print jobs 68
vertical voids appear on
prints 292
Index 337
viewing
reports 237
viewing a fax log 110
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 236
voice mail
setting up 92
voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP)
fax setup 98
VoIP adapter 98
volatile memory 204
erasing 205
volatility
statement of 204
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 214
replacing 215
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 262
wiping the printer hard disk 206
Wireless menu 138
wireless network
configuration information 39
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 41
wireless setup wizard
using 40
X
XPS menu 193
Index 338